User manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsCamerasCasio EX-ZR3500

.ﺍﺬﻫ

CASIO

ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟ ﻙءﺍﺮﺷ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻙﺮﻜﺸﻧ

•.ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻃﺎﻴﺘﺣﻻﺍ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻦﻣ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﻖﻘﺤﺗ

•.

ﻼﺒﻘﺘﺴﻣ ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ

• ﻰﻠﻋ ﻲﻤﺳﺮﻟﺍ

EXILIM

ﻊﻗﻮﻣ ﺓﺭﺎﻳﺰﺑ ﻢﻗ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻣﻮﻠﻌﻤﻟﺍ ﺙﺪﺣﺃ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻉﻼﻃﻺﻟ

http://www.exilim.com/

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (225 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍءﻙ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ CASIO‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ EXILIM‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.
PAGE 2
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪ NP-130A‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(AD-C53U‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ*‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫* ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ‪ B‬ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺴﺎﺅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪2.....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ! ‪4..........................................................................................
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ‪55 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪56 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪).................................................................‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪58 ......((SR‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) ..............................‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪59 ......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪) ................................
PAGE 7
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫)‪101 (REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪101 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪) ..........................................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪102 ....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪) .............................................‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‪102 ....
PAGE 8
‫❚❙ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪120‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪120 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪120 .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ‪121 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪122 ...........................................................................
PAGE 9
‫❚❙ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫‪143‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪143 .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪145 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ‪147 ......................................‬‬ ‫❚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪147 .....................................................
PAGE 10
‫❚❙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫❚‬ ‫)‪172 (SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪172 .........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .....................................................................‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪172 ....(ECO‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪) ..................................................................‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪173 ....‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) .....................................
PAGE 11
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪(29 ،21‬‬ ‫‪cn‬‬ ‫‪co‬‬ ‫‪cp‬‬ ‫‪cq‬‬ ‫‪ cn‬ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ co‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ cp‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ cq‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )]‪ ،([6] ،[4] ،[2] ،[8‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 14
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪234‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪) (CS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(218‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ*‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(60‬‬ ‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪ .
PAGE 16
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ (DISP) [8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(117‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 19‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 33‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 77‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﻫﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﺒﺘﻚ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪...
PAGE 20
‫‪ .‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﺳﺘﻤﻴﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 177‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ )‪ NP-130A‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪CASIO‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (11‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(203‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪.(2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫]‪[USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 25
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻳﻮﻟﻴﻮ‪٢٠١٦ ،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ‪/‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪/‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪16/7/10 3‬‬ ‫‪10/7/16 3‬‬ ‫‪7/10/16 3‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.218‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (28‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (11‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(33‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(41‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻳﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(STD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪73‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ :(HS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪77‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪...
PAGE 36
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(101‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.120‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.122‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ ،(CS‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.123‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(177‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [2‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻧﻌﻢ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬ ‫(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ”‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 42
‫‪ M‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) M‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(43‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[4‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) S‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪*.
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ HS‬ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫“ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ”‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﻸ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Make-up‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (50‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(108‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Make-up‬ﻭﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜ ّﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻃﻼﻋﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO) ISO‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫‪ISO80‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﻲء‬ ‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO100‬‬ ‫‪ISO200‬‬ ‫‪ISO400‬‬ ‫‪ISO800‬‬ ‫‪ISO1600‬‬ ‫‪ISO3200‬‬ ‫‪ISO6400‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪(.
PAGE 50
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪Make-up‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (EV‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ –2.0EV :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2.0EV‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪1/3EV :‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،[8‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .EV‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ EV‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫]‪) [2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫> ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬ ‫? ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪ .
PAGE 53
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ )ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(103‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣٠٠ ،١٩٢ ،١٤٠ ،١٠٥ ،٨٠ ،٥٠ ،٣٥ ،٢٨ ،٢٥‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻢ؛ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪.
PAGE 57
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫)ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ “(SR‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪((SR‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ .SR‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.59‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.57‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 59
‫ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [j‬ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻧﺴﺠﺔ ﺭﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ،(CS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻟـ ‪ CS‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ“‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 63
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(AF CS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ AF CS‬ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻼ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﺢ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫– ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫– ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫)ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ )‪(Art Shot‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (92‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ”‪ ،“Art Shot‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻗﺔ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪.“Art Shot‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ،“Art Shot‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،HDR Art‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ“ ﺇﻣﺎ ”‪ “HD‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “STD‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻫﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ” ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ“ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺮﺗﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺳﻴﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [D‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ ُﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫)‪STD‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.77‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪(FHD‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪) [Ÿ‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [P‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪[Ÿ‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫”‪ ،“r REC MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 74
‫‪.٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) MOV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(170‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 75
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(116‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫– ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(55‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻭﺯﻭﻭﻡ ‪ SR‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (59‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .
PAGE 77
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ”‪ 30-120‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ“ ﺃﻭ ”‪ 30-240‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(73‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(HS1000 ،HS480 ،HS240 ،HS120‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫ ًﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [0‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻭﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪) [F‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ »‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(176‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(176‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ STD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻳﺸ ّﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ ٢١‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ]‪.(BEST SHOT) [b‬‬ ‫]‪[b‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪.BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ(‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ .
PAGE 90
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )‪(Custom Shot‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫”‪ .“Custom Shot‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ”‪ “Custom Shot‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫”‪.“Custom Shot‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪A‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪S‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ‪M‬‬ ‫• ‪) BEST SHOT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ )ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(“ ﻭ”ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪(“HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 91
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Custom Shot‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ“ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(88‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ )‪(Make-up‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Make-up‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻮﺭﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ”‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،Make-up BKT‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻧﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Make-up BKT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺳﻤﺮﺍء ‪ “6+‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ‪ “6+‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ“‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ )ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(43‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺿﺨﻢ ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻪ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ‪ ١٥‬ﻭ‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻣﻢ )ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[SET‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(43‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 97
‫‪.٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺘﻔﻴﻚ ﻛﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 98
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺆﺭﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣ ًﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ،٩:١٦‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ .
PAGE 100
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.99‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(127‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )‪(REC MENU‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (43‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫]‪[8] [2] [4] [6‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.
PAGE 102
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪CS :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 60‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 64‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪.BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.128‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻻﻗﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ*‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ*‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪106‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.44‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﺪ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(49‬‬ ‫‪ISO 200‬‬ ‫‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫‪ISO 800‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫“ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ” ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) “ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪ U‬ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ“ ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ š‬ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (108‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 108
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ ،BEST SHOT‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ I‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ“ ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ“ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 109
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫– ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪Art Shot‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪ BEST SHOT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫– ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ )ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪BEST SHOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ًﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‪) “AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫”ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ“‪ .
PAGE 110
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ“ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ً .
PAGE 111
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٦٥٦x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٢٤٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪8M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٤٤٨x٣٢٦٤‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (140‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪HDTV‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪A4‬‬ ‫"‪3.
PAGE 112
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ “ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ”‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻀﺤﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ (L‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪x‬ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ(( ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪ ١٤٫٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‪/‬ﺙ‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺙ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ )‪) (FHD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(73‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ –‪) ٢‬ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ –‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (HDR ART)) HDR Art‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪HDR‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 69‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ EV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻄﻞ )ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪(.
PAGE 120
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 37‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪) »/» :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫]‪) [6] [4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.([) z‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (139‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪ (CS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 123
‫]‪[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪(DISP) [8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪([) z‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(99‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮ ًﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫”ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) “HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(99‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 127
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) HDMI‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ “¥ SETTING‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ “HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .
PAGE 128
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪.(p PLAY MENU‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫”‪ ،“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ 25‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪ :Z‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪(CS‬‬ ‫‪ T‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫» ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫» ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ١٥ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٣٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ٦٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮ
PAGE 131
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [SET‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[MENU‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [8‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫‪ ١٠٠٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 134
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﻟﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻣﺠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻣﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪) ٠‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ٢+‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(114‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ( ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺳﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ –‪) ٢‬ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪) ٢+‬ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 157‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﻭﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[2] [8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”)‪ “am (pm‬ﻭ”‪) “24h‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ 8M :‬ﻭ‪ 3M‬ﻭ‪.VGA‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ٢:٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:١٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ٣:٤‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻤﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻧﺴﺦ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 142
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 124‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth® Smart‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(152‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 145
‫‪ .‬ﺣﻮﻝ ‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪EXILIM Connect‬‬ ‫‪http://www.exilim.com/manual/‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،EXILIM Connect‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.Adobe Reader‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PDF‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 146
‫‪ .‬ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google Play‬ﺃﻭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth low energy‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Bluetooth low energy‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺑﺪء ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [W‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ .“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 152
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ EXILIM Connect‬ﻣﺜﺒ ًﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [W‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [W‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻭ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(148‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ .
PAGE 155
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪»T‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ T‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(156‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ*‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“p PLAY MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [4‬ﻭ]‪ [6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ “DPOF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 159
‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻻﻗﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[2‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ “DPOF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 160
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،DPOF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪ “٠٠‬ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻉ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪!DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺒﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ DPOF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .
PAGE 161
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(166 ،162‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(168 ،165‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 162
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪،Windows 8‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫‪،Windows 8‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 163
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.24‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 164
‫‪.٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪ :Windows 8 ،Windows 8.1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫“‬ ‫”‬ ‫“‬ ‫”‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Vista‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ‪،Windows 7‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ”ﻟﺼﻖ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ”‪) “DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ“‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ‪ Windows 8.1‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8‬ﻭ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪.Windows Media Player 12‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ QuickTime 7‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://www.apple.com/quicktime/‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪/‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪OS X‬‬ ‫‪ ،iPhoto‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Macintosh‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪ OS X 10.
PAGE 167
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(163‬‬ ‫‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(24‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Macintosh‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Mac OS X 10.5 :‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ‪) QuickTime Player :‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 169
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(170‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺄﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ CIMG0001‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 170
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪.(DCF) Design Rule for Camera File System‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ‪ CASIO‬ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ DCF‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 171
‫‪ .‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪DCF‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .DCF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻣﺘﻰ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DCIM‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪ .
PAGE 172
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )‪(SETTING‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ”‪ ،“¥ SETTING‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[SET‬‬ ‫‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 173
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١+‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﺴﺮﺍً‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪٢+‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠‬‬ ‫‪١+‬‬ ‫‪٠‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫–‪١‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(169‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺨﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴُﺎ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٣٠ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻄﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪(PLAY) [p‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪PLAY :‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [p‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﻃﻨﻚ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٦٢‬ﻣﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ“ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[6‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”ﻣﺤﻠﻲ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ“‬ ‫]‪[2] [8‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫]‪[6] [4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪[SET‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”)‪ “am (pm‬ﻭ”‪) “24h‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﻫﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [8‬ﻭ]‪ [2‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺪء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ٢٠٠١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.
PAGE 180
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Language‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Language :‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ”‪.“¥‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“Language‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪) HDMI‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 127‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 181
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 207‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(148‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (153‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ“‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 183
‫*ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫– ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء )ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ(‪.
PAGE 184
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ً .
PAGE 185
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ* ﻻﻧﺴﻜﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺯﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .
PAGE 186
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 187
‫*ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺮﺗﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 188
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 189
‫*ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺴﺮ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻟﺘﻬﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺑﺸﻄﻒ ﻓﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺘﻪ ﻟﺠﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻄﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 191
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺨﺎً‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 192
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪http://world.casio.com/r-law/dc/‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 193
‫•‬ ‫‪The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. is under‬‬ ‫‪license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬. ً ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ‬ .‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ OpenVG 1.1 Reference Implementation Copyright (c) 2007 The Khronos Group Inc.
PAGE 195
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
PAGE 196
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. 3. Grant of Patent License.
PAGE 197
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.
PAGE 198
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License.
PAGE 199
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. "License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. "Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
PAGE 200
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner.
PAGE 201
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and (d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form
PAGE 202
8. Limitation of Liability.
PAGE 203
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻷﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﺎً ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺰﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 205
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 28‬ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‪ .
PAGE 206
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﺗﻘﻚ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻚ ﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ([MENU‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(181‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﺔ )–( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ :CS‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ :ISO‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ :AF‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ )‪ :(SR‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪p PLAY MENU .
PAGE 209
‫‪¥ SETTING .
PAGE 210
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺮﺍﻡ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(22‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪ CASIO NP-130A‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ? )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻛﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(52‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺾ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 212
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .
PAGE 214
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(179‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(180‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (١‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪ (٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(26‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ALERT‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺭ“ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ”ﺻﻮﺭ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (130‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 217
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻄﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LOCK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ LOCK‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ SDXC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 218
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪12M‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٠٠٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٦٥٦x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٢٤٠x٤٠٠٠‬‬ ‫‪8M‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٤٤٨x٣٢٦٤‬‬ ‫‪3M‬‬ ‫)‪(١٥٣٦x٢٠٤٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ ٧٫٨٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪٢ SD‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪١٤٥٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٤٫١٣‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٢٢٢١‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٦٫٨٧‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪١٦٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٦٢‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٢٥٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٥٫٦٦‬ﻡ ﺏ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٢٠١٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٠‬ﻡ
PAGE 219
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻼﺕ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ*‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪*SD‬‬ ‫‪FHD‬‬ ‫)‪(١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪HD‬‬ ‫)‪(٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪STD‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪HS1000‬‬ ‫)‪(٦٤x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS480‬‬ ‫)‪(١٦٠x٢٢٤‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS240‬‬ ‫)‪(٣٨٤x٥١٢‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪HS120‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)
PAGE 220
‫*‪٣‬‬ ‫*‪٤‬‬ ‫*‪٥‬‬ ‫*‪٦‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ FHD‬ﻭ‪ .HS‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Ultra‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(75 ،28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Art Shot‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 221
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ Exif) JPEG ،*(DNG) RAW‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2.3‬؛ ‪ DCF 2.0‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ؛ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،MOV‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) IMA-ADPCM ،H.264/AVC‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬ ‫* ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ DNG‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﺗُﻮﺻﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Adobe Systems Incorporated‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 222
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ –2.0EV‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +2.
PAGE 223
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 224
‫‪ .‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪ NP-130A‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ١٨٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪) ٣٧٫٨‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪) ٤٤٫٨ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪) ١١٫٢ x‬ﻋﻤﻖ( ﻣﻢ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٣٨‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 225
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.